131+ Garage Configurations In Stock | Free Install on All Tubular Steel Orders
Metal Garages & Steel Garage Kits For Sale
Fully enclosed prefabricated steel garages with free delivery and professional installation in all 48 contiguous states. Standard, triple-wide and lean-to configurations. 12 or 14 gauge galvanized frames with a 20-year rust-through warranty.
620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 31′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×31 Houses of Worship | Steel and Stud, From $11,100
20×31 Houses of Worship, engineered to code for assembly use.
Our 20×31 houses of worship fits 20-foot widths and 31-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Churches, mosques, temples, and gurdwaras. Column-free 620 sq ft interior fits.
You’re viewing:Houses of Worship·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,100$12,650Save $1,550
or as low as $231/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-HOUSES-WORSHIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 houses of worship.
20 feet wide × 31 feet long. Our 20×31 houses of worship fits 20-foot widths and 31-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes.
Houses of Worship layout.
Our 20×31 houses of worship fits 20-foot widths and 31-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Churches, mosques, temples, and gurdwaras. Column-free 620 sq ft interior fits small-group seating, fellowship use, classrooms, and multi-purpose community layouts.
💡 Pro tip:Houses of Worship works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×31 Houses of Worship in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Houses of Worship spec sheet.
Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Houses of Worship.
DAILY USE
Everyday houses of worship
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a houses of worship.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
houses of worship + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×31 Houses of Worship, what makes it different.
620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$231/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×31 houses of worship is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $231/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×31?
620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Houses of Worship shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×31 Houses of Worship buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×31 Houses of Worship
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×31 houses of worship from Steel and Stud starts at $11,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $231/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 houses of worship price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud houses of worship ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×31 houses of worship?
Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud houses of worship different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×31 houses of worship need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×31 houses of worship delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×31 houses of worship without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $231/month on a 20×31 houses of worship.
What warranty comes with the 20×31 houses of worship?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×31 houses of worship in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 20×31 houses of worship pass community-use and assembly inspections?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.
Ready to build?
Your Houses of Worship quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 31′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,100.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.
Homeowners spec this as a detached two car garage with a workbench wall and tool storage at the rear. Two full-size trucks park nose-in with about 12 feet behind for shelving and a workbench. The extra length over a.
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 two-car detached garage.
20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Homeowners spec this as a detached two car garage with a workbench wall and tool storage at the rear.
Two-Car Detached Garage layout.
Homeowners spec this as a detached two car garage with a workbench wall and tool storage at the rear. Two full-size trucks park nose-in with about 12 feet behind for shelving and a workbench. The extra length over a 20×36 means you don’t have to back the second vehicle out to reach the toolbox.
💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Detached Garage works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Two-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.
Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Two-Car Detached Garage.
DAILY USE
Everyday two-car detached garage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
two-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×36 two-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×36?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Two-Car Detached Garage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 20×36 two-car detached garage cost?
A 20×36 two-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 two-car detached garage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×36 two-car detached garage?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud two-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×36 two-car detached garage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×36 two-car detached garage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×36 two-car detached garage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 20×36 two-car detached garage.
What warranty comes with the 20×36 two-car detached garage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×36 two-car detached garage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 20×36 two-car detached garage add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 20×36 two-car detached garage typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Two-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage, built for daily backyard use.
20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of everyday three-car compact garage space. Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle. The 35-foot.
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-THREE-CAR-COMPACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 three-car compact garage.
20 feet wide × 36 feet long. 20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of everyday three-car compact garage space.
Three-Car Compact Garage layout.
20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of everyday three-car compact garage space. Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle. The 35-foot length swallows a Civic, Corolla, and Mazda3 with door-swing room. Spec a 20×36 roll-up on each gable for pull-through, or one 16-foot opening for side parking.
💡 Pro tip:Three-Car Compact Garage works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Three-Car Compact Garage spec sheet.
Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Three-Car Compact Garage.
DAILY USE
Everyday three-car compact garage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-car compact garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
three-car compact garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×36 three-car compact garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×36?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Three-Car Compact Garage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 20×36 three-car compact garage cost?
A 20×36 three-car compact garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 three-car compact garage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud three-car compact garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×36 three-car compact garage?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud three-car compact garage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×36 three-car compact garage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×36 three-car compact garage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×36 three-car compact garage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 20×36 three-car compact garage.
What warranty comes with the 20×36 three-car compact garage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×36 three-car compact garage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 20×36 three-car compact garage add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 20×36 three-car compact garage typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Three-Car Compact Garage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×36 RV Cover and Carport | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
20×36 RV Cover and Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.
20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of hobby-ready rv cover and carport space. RV owners use the 35-foot length to cover a Class C, Class B+, or 30-foot travel trailer with hitch room to spare. A 13-foot leg height clears most.
You’re viewing:RV Cover and Carport·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-RV-COVER-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 rv cover and carport.
20 feet wide × 36 feet long. 20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of hobby-ready rv cover and carport space.
RV Cover and Carport layout.
20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of hobby-ready rv cover and carport space. RV owners use the 35-foot length to cover a Class C, Class B+, or 30-foot travel trailer with hitch room to spare. A 13-foot leg height clears most rooftop AC units and slide-toppers. Order it open on the gable ends, partially enclosed for storage, or fully enclosed as a garage with a 20×36 roll-up.
💡 Pro tip:RV Cover and Carport works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×36 RV Cover and Carport in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
RV Cover and Carport spec sheet.
Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use RV Cover and Carport.
DAILY USE
Everyday rv cover and carport
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover and carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
rv cover and carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×36 RV Cover and Carport, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×36 rv cover and carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×36?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from RV Cover and Carport shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×36 RV Cover and Carport buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×36 RV Cover and Carport
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×36 rv cover and carport from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 rv cover and carport price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover and carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×36 rv cover and carport?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud rv cover and carport different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×36 rv cover and carport need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×36 rv cover and carport delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×36 rv cover and carport without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 20×36 rv cover and carport.
What warranty comes with the 20×36 rv cover and carport?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×36 rv cover and carport in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Can I insulate the 20×36 rv cover and carport for year-round use?
Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover and carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.
Ready to build?
Your RV Cover and Carport quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop | Steel and Stud, From $12,500
20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 workshop and detached shop packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached.
You’re viewing:Workshop and Detached Shop·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,500$14,250Save $1,750
or as low as $260/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-WORKSHOP-DETACHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 workshop and detached shop.
20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 workshop and detached shop packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Workshop and Detached Shop layout.
Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 workshop and detached shop packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached shop. 720 sq ft holds a table saw, miter station, drill press, MIG welder, and a 20×36 assembly bench without crowding. Add R-19 fiberglass batt insulation, a 36-inch walk-in, and two 20×36 windows for cross-ventilation and natural light.
💡 Pro tip:Workshop and Detached Shop works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Workshop and Detached Shop spec sheet.
Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Workshop and Detached Shop.
DAILY USE
Everyday workshop and detached shop
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop and detached shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
workshop and detached shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$260/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×36 workshop and detached shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $260/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×36?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Workshop and Detached Shop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 20×36 workshop and detached shop cost?
A 20×36 workshop and detached shop from Steel and Stud starts at $12,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $260/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 workshop and detached shop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop and detached shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×36 workshop and detached shop?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud workshop and detached shop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×36 workshop and detached shop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×36 workshop and detached shop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×36 workshop and detached shop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $260/month on a 20×36 workshop and detached shop.
What warranty comes with the 20×36 workshop and detached shop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×36 workshop and detached shop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 20×36 workshop and detached shop meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Workshop and Detached Shop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$12,500.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed | Steel and Stud, From $11,300
20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.
Looking for a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Hobby farmers cover a sub-compact tractor, brush hog, finish mower, ATV, and a stack of round.
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-HOBBY-FARM-EQUIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed.
20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Looking for a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.
Hobby Farm Equipment Shed layout.
Looking for a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Hobby farmers cover a sub-compact tractor, brush hog, finish mower, ATV, and a stack of round bales under one roof. The 12-foot leg option clears a Kubota with a front-end loader raised. Open the gable end for drive-through access and add a lean-to later for hay storage off one sidewall.
💡 Pro tip:Hobby Farm Equipment Shed works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Hobby Farm Equipment Shed spec sheet.
Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Hobby Farm Equipment Shed.
DAILY USE
Everyday hobby farm equipment shed
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby farm equipment shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
hobby farm equipment shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×36?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Hobby Farm Equipment Shed shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed cost?
A 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment shed different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed.
What warranty comes with the 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Hobby Farm Equipment Shed quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,300.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn | Steel and Stud, From $11,300
20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.
Our 20×36 two-stall horse barn fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Equestrians configure this footprint as two 20×36 stalls plus an 11-foot.
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-TWO-STALL-HORSE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 two-stall horse barn.
20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 20×36 two-stall horse barn fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.
Two-Stall Horse Barn layout.
Our 20×36 two-stall horse barn fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Equestrians configure this footprint as two 20×36 stalls plus an 11-foot tack/feed aisle. The vertical roof sheds rain cleanly off the 35-foot run, and 20×36 windows on each stall give airflow. Add a sliding barn door at one gable and Dutch doors on the long wall for direct paddock turnout.
💡 Pro tip:Two-Stall Horse Barn works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Two-Stall Horse Barn spec sheet.
Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Two-Stall Horse Barn.
DAILY USE
Everyday two-stall horse barn
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-stall horse barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
two-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×36 two-stall horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×36?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Two-Stall Horse Barn shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×36 two-stall horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 two-stall horse barn price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud two-stall horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×36 two-stall horse barn?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud two-stall horse barn different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×36 two-stall horse barn need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×36 two-stall horse barn delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×36 two-stall horse barn without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 20×36 two-stall horse barn.
What warranty comes with the 20×36 two-stall horse barn?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×36 two-stall horse barn in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 20×36 two-stall horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Two-Stall Horse Barn quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,300.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×36 Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
20×36 Storage Building, built for daily backyard use.
Our 20×36 storage building fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Spec one 20×36 roll-up for ride-on equipment and one 36-inch walk-in for daily.
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 storage building.
20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 20×36 storage building fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.
Storage Building layout.
Our 20×36 storage building fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Spec one 20×36 roll-up for ride-on equipment and one 36-inch walk-in for daily access. 14-gauge framing and 29-gauge panels keep the price floor low.
💡 Pro tip:Storage Building works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×36 Storage Building in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Storage Building spec sheet.
Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Storage Building.
DAILY USE
Everyday storage building
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×36 Storage Building, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×36 storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×36?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Storage Building shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×36 Storage Building buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×36 Storage Building
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×36 storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 storage building price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×36 storage building?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud storage building different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×36 storage building need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×36 storage building delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×36 storage building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 20×36 storage building.
What warranty comes with the 20×36 storage building?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×36 storage building in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 20×36 storage building add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 20×36 storage building typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Storage Building quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×36 Man Cave and She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,650
20×36 Man Cave and She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.
Looking for a 20×36 man cave and she shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×36.
You’re viewing:Man Cave and She Shed·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 man cave and she shed.
20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Looking for a 20×36 man cave and she shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.
Man Cave and She Shed layout.
Looking for a 20×36 man cave and she shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×36 windows, and add French doors for curb appeal. The 720 sq ft fits a pool table, bar, sectional, and TV wall, or a craft studio with cutting tables, shelving, and a reading nook. Insulate with R-13 vapor barrier minimum.
💡 Pro tip:Man Cave and She Shed works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×36 Man Cave and She Shed in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Man Cave and She Shed spec sheet.
Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Man Cave and She Shed.
DAILY USE
Everyday man cave and she shed
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave and she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
man cave and she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×36 Man Cave and She Shed, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×36 man cave and she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×36?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Man Cave and She Shed shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×36 Man Cave and She Shed buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×36 Man Cave and She Shed
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 20×36 man cave and she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 man cave and she shed price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave and she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×36 man cave and she shed?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud man cave and she shed different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×36 man cave and she shed need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×36 man cave and she shed delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×36 man cave and she shed without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 20×36 man cave and she shed.
What warranty comes with the 20×36 man cave and she shed?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×36 man cave and she shed in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Can I insulate the 20×36 man cave and she shed for year-round use?
Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave and she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.
Ready to build?
Your Man Cave and She Shed quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover | Steel and Stud, From $12,500
20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job.
You’re viewing:Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,500$14,250Save $1,750
or as low as $260/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-CONTRACTOR-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover.
20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover layout.
Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job trailer plus a service van under one roof. The taller 13-foot leg clears box trucks and ladder racks. Spec a 20×36 roll-up at the gable, a slide-bolt walk-in, and security bars on the windows for tool theft protection on remote yards.
💡 Pro tip:Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
Everything in your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover.
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover spec sheet.
Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover.
DAILY USE
Everyday contractor storage and job trailer cover
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor storage and job trailer cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
contractor storage and job trailer cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover, what makes it different.
720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$260/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $260/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 20×36?
720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover questions, answered.
How much does a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover cost?
A 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover from Steel and Stud starts at $12,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $260/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor storage and job trailer cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover?
Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud contractor storage and job trailer cover different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $260/month on a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover.
What warranty comes with the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
20′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$12,500.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench | Steel and Stud, From $9,550
18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, built for daily backyard use.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners pick the 18×36 when a basic 18×36 feels cramped and a 18×36.
You’re viewing:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-SINGLE-CAR-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools
Vehicle bay 1 on one end, vehicle bay 2 through the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Homeowners pick the 18×36 when a basic 18×36 feels cramped and a 18×36 feels excessive.
💡 Pro tip:Fits Full-Size Truck, add insulation, electrical, and a vehicle bay 1-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
Everything in your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.
DAILY USE
Everyday single-car garage with workshop bench
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car garage with workshop bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
single-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench questions, answered.
How much does a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench cost?
A 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$9,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists | Steel and Stud, From $9,550
18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, built for daily backyard use.
Our 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this.
You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.
Workbench wall on one end, table saw / center through the middle, lumber / storage at the rear. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a dedicated shop separate from the house.
💡 Pro tip:Hobbyist Favorite, add insulation, electrical, and a workbench wall-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
Everything in your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.
DAILY USE
Everyday backyard workshop for hobbyists
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop for hobbyists.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
backyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists questions, answered.
How much does a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists cost?
A 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$9,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side | Steel and Stud, From $9,550
18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, built for daily backyard use.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet wide if you’re.
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-TWO-COMPACT-CARSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your two compact cars tucked side-by-side layout.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side layout.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet wide if you’re careful with the doors. Most buyers pair this with a single 16-foot roll-up door for both bays. You won’t have room for storage along the walls, but you will get both cars under steel.
💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Capable, add insulation, electrical, and a main-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
Everything in your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.
DAILY USE
Everyday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two compact cars tucked side-by-side.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
two compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side questions, answered.
How much does a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side cost?
A 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$9,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $9,550
18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.
Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 home office and hobby room packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×36 into a fully insulated.
You’re viewing:Home Office and Hobby Room·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-HOME-OFFICE-HOBBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 home office and hobby room packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage
Main lounge on one end, wet bar / kitch. through the middle, bath / storage at the rear. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×36 into a fully insulated detached office.
💡 Pro tip:Detached Office, add insulation, electrical, and a main lounge-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Home Office and Hobby Room spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Home Office and Hobby Room.
DAILY USE
Everyday home office and hobby room
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office and hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
home office and hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 home office and hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Home Office and Hobby Room shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 18×36 home office and hobby room cost?
A 18×36 home office and hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 home office and hobby room price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud home office and hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 home office and hobby room?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud home office and hobby room different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 home office and hobby room need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 home office and hobby room delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 home office and hobby room without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 home office and hobby room.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 home office and hobby room?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 home office and hobby room in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 18×36 home office and hobby room add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 18×36 home office and hobby room typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Home Office and Hobby Room quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$9,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $10,200
18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.
Looking for a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×36 as a dedicated equipment shed.
You’re viewing:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,200$11,650Save $1,450
or as low as $213/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-ATV-MOWER-LAWN-EBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your toy-storage layout.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Looking for a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.
ATV / bikes · Daily driver · Tool wall
ATV / bikes on one end, daily driver through the middle, tool wall at the rear. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×36 as a dedicated equipment shed.
💡 Pro tip:Rural Workhorse, add insulation, electrical, and a atv / bikes-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
Everything in your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$213/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $213/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage questions, answered.
How much does a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage cost?
A 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $213/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $213/month on a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,200.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage | Steel and Stud, From $10,200
18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.
Looking for a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with.
You’re viewing:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,200$11,650Save $1,450
or as low as $213/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-TRACTOR-SHED-IMPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Looking for a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.
Tractor bay · Implement bay · Tool rack
Tractor bay on one end, implement bay through the middle, tool rack at the rear. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised.
💡 Pro tip:Tractor Clearance, add insulation, electrical, and a tractor bay-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
Everything in your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tractor Shed with Implement Storage spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday tractor shed with implement storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor shed with implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
tractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$213/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $213/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Tractor Shed with Implement Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
Tractor Shed with Implement Storage questions, answered.
How much does a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage cost?
A 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $213/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $213/month on a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$10,200.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Our 18×36 small business inventory storage fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×36 as a dedicated stock room.
You’re viewing:Small Business Inventory Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,400$13,000Save $1,600
or as low as $238/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.
18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 18×36 small business inventory storage fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.
Inventory racks on one end, loading bay through the middle, office / desk at the rear. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×36 as a dedicated stock room separate from the house.
💡 Pro tip:12 Pallet Spots, add insulation, electrical, and a inventory racks-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
Everything in your Small Business Inventory Storage.
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Small Business Inventory Storage spec sheet.
Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Small Business Inventory Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday small business inventory storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
small business inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage, what makes it different.
648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$238/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 18×36 small business inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $238/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 18×36?
648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Small Business Inventory Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
Small Business Inventory Storage questions, answered.
How much does a 18×36 small business inventory storage cost?
A 18×36 small business inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 small business inventory storage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud small business inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 18×36 small business inventory storage?
Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud small business inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 18×36 small business inventory storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 18×36 small business inventory storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 18×36 small business inventory storage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 18×36 small business inventory storage.
What warranty comes with the 18×36 small business inventory storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 18×36 small business inventory storage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 18×36 small business inventory storage meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Small Business Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
{“@context”:”https://schema.org”,”@type”:”FAQPage”,”mainEntity”:[{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”How much does a 18×36 small business inventory storage cost?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”A 18×36 small business inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 small business inventory storage price?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Yes, every Steel and Stud small business inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”Do I need a permit for a 18×36 small business inventory storage?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”How is a Steel and Stud small business inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”What foundation does a 18×36 small business inventory storage need?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”How fast can I get a 18×36 small business inventory storage delivered?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”Can I finance a 18×36 small business inventory storage without a credit check?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 18×36 small business inventory storage.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”What warranty comes with the 18×36 small business inventory storage?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”Can I customize the 18×36 small business inventory storage in 3D before I order?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.”}},{“@type”:”Question”,”name”:”Does the 18×36 small business inventory storage meet IBC commercial code?”,”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:”Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.”}}]}
const VARIANTS = {“office”:{“name”:”Small Business Inventory Storage”,”slug”:”18×36-small-business-inventory-storage”,”breadcrumb”:”Small Business Inventory Storage”,”sku”:”SS-18×36-COMSMA”,”units”:”1,847+”,”reviews”:”0″,”price”:11400,”was”:13000,”save”:1600,”monthly”:238,”urgCount”:”4 buyers”,”heroTag”:”★ Pro Spec”,”gallery”:[“https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/18×36-metal-building-hero-1.jpg”,”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/18×36-configuration-view.jpg”,”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/18×36-free-standing-view.jpg”,”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/18×36-side-elevation.jpg”,”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/18×36-three-quarter-perspective.jpg”],”colors”:[{“id”:”slate”,”name”:”Slate Gray”,”hex”:”#3F4A55″,”popular”:true},{“id”:”charcoal”,”name”:”Charcoal”,”hex”:”#1A1F2C”},{“id”:”barnred”,”name”:”Barn Red”,”hex”:”#7A1F1F”},{“id”:”forest”,”name”:”Forest Green”,”hex”:”#1F4F38″},{“id”:”navy”,”name”:”Patriot Blue”,”hex”:”#274169″},{“id”:”mocha”,”name”:”Mocha”,”hex”:”#6B5340″},{“id”:”sand”,”name”:”Sand Beige”,”hex”:”#D6D2C4″},{“id”:”white”,”name”:”Polar White”,”hex”:”#E8E4DC”}],”sizes”:[{“id”:”18×35″,”label”:”18×35″,”subtitle”:”smaller”,”price”:11150,”current”:false,”hubSlug”:”18×35″},{“id”:”18×36″,”label”:”18×36″,”subtitle”:”this size”,”price”:11400,”current”:true,”hubSlug”:null}],”heights”:[{“id”:”7″,”label”:”7′”,”price”:0},{“id”:”8″,”label”:”8′”,”price”:0},{“id”:”9″,”label”:”9′”,”price”:0,”current”:true,”popular”:true},{“id”:”10″,”label”:”10′”,”price”:340},{“id”:”12″,”label”:”12′”,”price”:640},{“id”:”14″,”label”:”14′”,”price”:1180}],”h1″:”18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.”,”tagline”:”Our 18×36 small business inventory storage fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×36 as a dedicated stock room.”,”bullets”:[“648 sq ft enclosed”,”10×8 Roll-Up“,”12 Pallet Spots“,”12′ Legs“,”180 mph wind certified”,”65 psf snow load”,”20-year rust warranty”,”Free delivery + install“],”fpH2Variant”:”contractor-storage layout”,”fpSub”:”18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 18×36 small business inventory storage fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.”,”fpInfoH”:”Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk”,”fpInfoP”:”Inventory racks on one end, loading bay through the middle, office / desk at the rear. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×36 as a dedicated stock room separate from the house.”,”fpProtip”:”12 Pallet Spots, add insulation, electrical, and a inventory racks-side window for year-round use.”,”fpKey”:”office”,”fpLabels”:[“Inventory racks”,”Loading bay”,”Office / Desk”],”fpTheme”:”contractor-storage layout”,”included”:[{“ic”:”🏗️”,”h”:”648 sq ft enclosed”,”p”:”Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.”},{“ic”:”🚪”,”h”:”Roll-up + walk-in doors”,”p”:”Standard configuration door package.”},{“ic”:”🔩”,”h”:”14-gauge steel frame”,”p”:”American-rolled galvanized tubing.”},{“ic”:”🎨”,”h”:”1 standard color”,”p”:”Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.”}],”specs”:[[“Width”,”18′”,false],[“Length”,”36′ + 6″ overhang”,false],[“Side height”,”9′ standard”,false],[“Floor space”,”648 sq ft”,true],[“Doors”,”1 × 9×8 roll-up”,false],[“Walk-in”,”Optional (+$345)”,false],[“Windows”,”Optional”,false],[“Wind”,”up to 180 mph”,true],[“Snow”,”up to 65 psf”,true],[“Roof”,”Vertical 3:12″,false],[“Frame”,”14 ga (12 ga upgrade)”,false],[“Sheeting”,”29 ga (26 ga upgrade)”,false],[“Anchoring”,”Concrete · Asphalt · Ground”,false],[“Lead time”,”3 – 5 weeks”,false]],”subUses”:[{“tag”:”DAILY USE”,”h”:”Everyday small business inventory storage”,”p”:”648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business inventory storage.”,”img”:”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/18×36-metal-building-hero-1.jpg”},{“tag”:”STORAGE OVERFLOW”,”h”:”small business inventory storage + seasonal storage”,”p”:”Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.”,”img”:”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/18×36-configuration-view.jpg”},{“tag”:”FLEX ROOM”,”h”:”Expansion-ready”,”p”:”Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.”,”img”:”https://www.steelandstud.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/18×36-free-standing-view.jpg”}],”lsi”:[“18×36 small business inventory storage”,”18×36 small business inventory storage”,”18 by 36 small business inventory storage”,”metal small business inventory storage”,”prefab small business inventory storage”,”small business inventory storage kit”,”small business inventory storage price”,”small business inventory storage cost”],”crosssell”:[{“ic”:”🏗️”,”bundle”:”Bundle & Save”,”name”:”Concrete Pad Pour”,”desc”:”19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.”,”p”:”$2,916″,”slug”:”concrete-pad-pour”},{“ic”:”🌡”,”bundle”:”Most Added”,”name”:”R-19 Insulation Package”,”desc”:”Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.”,”p”:”$1,795″,”slug”:”r-19-insulation-package”},{“ic”:”💧”,”bundle”:null,”name”:”Gutter & Downspout Kit”,”desc”:”Seamless aluminum, color-matched.”,”p”:”$485″,”slug”:”gutter-downspout-kit”},{“ic”:”⚡”,”bundle”:null,”name”:”200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire”,”desc”:”Conduit + sub-panel housing.”,”p”:”$695″,”slug”:”200-amp-sub-panel”}],”related”:[{“v”:”card_18x36-single-car-garage-workshop-bench”,”name”:”Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench”,”p”:”Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench”,”price”:”$9,550″,”ic”:”🏡”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/18×36-single-car-garage-workshop-bench/”},{“v”:”card_18x36-backyard-workshop-hobbyists”,”name”:”Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists”,”p”:”Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists”,”price”:”$9,550″,”ic”:”🏡”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/18×36-backyard-workshop-hobbyists/”},{“v”:”card_18x36-two-compact-cars-tucked-side-by-side”,”name”:”Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side”,”p”:”Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side”,”price”:”$9,550″,”ic”:”🏡”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/18×36-two-compact-cars-tucked-side-by-side/”},{“v”:”card_18x36-home-office-hobby-room”,”name”:”Home Office and Hobby Room”,”p”:”Home Office and Hobby Room”,”price”:”$9,550″,”ic”:”🏡”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/18×36-home-office-hobby-room/”},{“v”:”card_18x36-atv-mower-lawn-equipment-storage”,”name”:”ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage”,”p”:”ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage”,”price”:”$10,200″,”ic”:”🌾”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/18×36-atv-mower-lawn-equipment-storage/”},{“v”:”card_18x36-tractor-shed-implement-storage”,”name”:”Tractor Shed with Implement Storage”,”p”:”Tractor Shed with Implement Storage”,”price”:”$10,200″,”ic”:”🌾”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/18×36-tractor-shed-implement-storage/”},{“v”:”card_18x36-collector-car-motorcycle-showroom”,”name”:”Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom”,”p”:”Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom”,”price”:”$9,550″,”ic”:”🎯”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/18×36-collector-car-motorcycle-showroom/”},{“v”:”card_18x36-contractor-job-site-tool-material-storage”,”name”:”Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage”,”p”:”Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage”,”price”:”$11,400″,”ic”:”🏢”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/18×36-contractor-job-site-tool-material-storage/”},{“v”:”card_18x36-pool-house-outdoor-entertainment-building”,”name”:”Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building”,”p”:”Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building”,”price”:”$9,550″,”ic”:”🎯”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/18×36-pool-house-outdoor-entertainment-building/”},{“v”:”card_18x36-garden-shed-greenhouse-combo”,”name”:”Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo”,”p”:”Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo”,”price”:”$9,550″,”ic”:”🏡”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/18×36-garden-shed-greenhouse-combo/”},{“v”:”card_18x36-church-nonprofit-community-storage”,”name”:”Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage”,”p”:”Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage”,”price”:”$11,500″,”ic”:”🏛️”,”url”:”/metal-buildings/18×36-church-nonprofit-community-storage/”}],”faqs”:[[“How much does a 18×36 small business inventory storage cost?”,”A 18×36 small business inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.”],[“Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 small business inventory storage price?”,”Yes, every Steel and Stud small business inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.”],[“Do I need a permit for a 18×36 small business inventory storage?”,”Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.”],[“How is a Steel and Stud small business inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?”,”Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.”],[“What foundation does a 18×36 small business inventory storage need?”,”A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.”],[“How fast can I get a 18×36 small business inventory storage delivered?”,”Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.”],[“Can I finance a 18×36 small business inventory storage without a credit check?”,”Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 18×36 small business inventory storage.”],[“What warranty comes with the 18×36 small business inventory storage?”,”Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.”],[“Can I customize the 18×36 small business inventory storage in 3D before I order?”,”Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.”],[“Does the 18×36 small business inventory storage meet IBC commercial code?”,”Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.”]],”_navurl”:null}};
const FPSVG_BUILDERS = { garage: (w,l,sqft) => `Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft`, workshop: (w,l,sqft) => `Pickup BayWORKSHOP${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft`, office: (w,l,sqft) => `Car 1Car 2OFFICE${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft`, living: (w,l,sqft) => `GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft ADU`, loft: (w,l,sqft) => `Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} ground + loft`, drivethru: (w,l,sqft) => `TruckTrailer${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft pass-through`, rv: (w,l,sqft) => `RV BAYDaily Driver${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft · tall walls`, “shop-only”: (w,l,sqft) => `↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack${w}′ × ${l}′ · ${sqft} sq ft shop` }; const STATES = [ {code:”AL”,name:”Alabama”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”15 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–4 wk”,note:”Gulf Coast counties require 150 mph upgrade. Tornado Alley adjacent, concrete pad anchoring recommended.”}, {code:”AK”,name:”Alaska”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”75 psf”,permit:”4–6 wk”,slot:”8–10 wk”,note:”12-gauge frame required for snow load. Lower 48 shipping adds ~$1,400.”}, {code:”AZ”,name:”Arizona”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”5 psf”,permit:”1–2 wk”,slot:”2–3 wk”,note:”Reflective roof finish recommended. UV-rated 40-year paint warranty included.”}, {code:”AR”,name:”Arkansas”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”15 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tornado-prone, 12-gauge frame and 26-gauge sheeting widely chosen.”}, {code:”CA”,name:”California”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”10 psf”,permit:”4–8 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Seismic anchoring required. ADU configuration qualifies for streamlined SB 9 / SB 35 permitting.”}, {code:”CO”,name:”Colorado”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”55 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”High-altitude snow: 65 psf required above 7,500 ft. Insulation strongly recommended.”}, {code:”CT”,name:”Connecticut”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Coastal CT requires 150 mph wind upgrade.”}, {code:”DE”,name:”Delaware”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Coastal salt-air, galvanized frame upgrade recommended for longevity.”}, {code:”FL”,name:”Florida”,wind:”160 mph”,snow:”0 psf”,permit:”3–6 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Hurricane zone, 12-gauge frame and Miami-Dade approved anchoring required. HVHZ certification available.”}, {code:”GA”,name:”Georgia”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”10 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Coastal counties need 140+ mph. Atlanta metro permits run 3-4 weeks.”}, {code:”ID”,name:”Idaho”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”35 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Mountain regions: 50 psf snow. Frost depth foundation specs required above 5,000 ft.”}, {code:”IL”,name:”Illinois”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Chicago Suburbs require 130 mph + 30 psf snow.”}, {code:”IN”,name:”Indiana”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Standard certification works statewide. NW Indiana may need 35 psf.”}, {code:”IA”,name:”Iowa”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Tornado-prone, 12-gauge frame upgrade common.”}, {code:”KS”,name:”Kansas”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”20 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tornado Alley center, 12-gauge frame strongly recommended.”}, {code:”KY”,name:”Kentucky”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”15 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Eastern KY mountain counties need 25 psf snow.”}, {code:”LA”,name:”Louisiana”,wind:”150 mph”,snow:”0 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Hurricane zone south of I-10, 12-gauge frame and elevated foundation common.”}, {code:”ME”,name:”Maine”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”55 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Heavy snow, 65 psf upgrade common. R-19 insulation recommended.”}, {code:”MD”,name:”Maryland”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Standard cert fits. Eastern Shore may need 140 mph upgrade.”}, {code:”MA”,name:”Massachusetts”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”45 psf”,permit:”4–6 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Cape Cod and Islands require 150 mph wind.”}, {code:”MI”,name:”Michigan”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Upper Peninsula: 60 psf snow.”}, {code:”MN”,name:”Minnesota”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”50 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Northern MN: 65 psf snow required.”}, {code:”MS”,name:”Mississippi”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”5 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Gulf Coast counties: 150 mph wind cert required.”}, {code:”MO”,name:”Missouri”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”20 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tornado-prone, 12-gauge frame strongly recommended.”}, {code:”MT”,name:”Montana”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–8 wk”,note:”Mountain counties need 60+ psf snow. Remote delivery surcharges may apply.”}, {code:”NE”,name:”Nebraska”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tornado Alley, 12-gauge upgrade strongly chosen.”}, {code:”NV”,name:”Nevada”,wind:”100 mph”,snow:”5 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Reflective roof recommended.”}, {code:”NH”,name:”New Hampshire”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”50 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Northern NH: 65 psf snow.”}, {code:”NJ”,name:”New Jersey”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”4–6 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Shore counties: 140 mph wind.”}, {code:”NM”,name:”New Mexico”,wind:”100 mph”,snow:”20 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”High-altitude builds need 35 psf snow load.”}, {code:”NY”,name:”New York”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”45 psf”,permit:”4–6 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”NYC area requires extensive permitting. Upstate: 50–65 psf snow.”}, {code:”NC”,name:”North Carolina”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”15 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Coastal counties: 150 mph wind cert. Mountain region: 30+ psf snow.”}, {code:”ND”,name:”North Dakota”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Severe winters, 12-gauge frame standard, R-19 insulation common.”}, {code:”OH”,name:”Ohio”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Standard certification fits statewide.”}, {code:”OK”,name:”Oklahoma”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”10 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tornado Alley, 12-gauge frame standard, safe room option available.”}, {code:”OR”,name:”Oregon”,wind:”100 mph”,snow:”35 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Coastal: 110 mph. ADU configuration qualifies for HB 2001 streamlined permitting.”}, {code:”PA”,name:”Pennsylvania”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”35 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Snow belt counties: 50 psf required.”}, {code:”RI”,name:”Rhode Island”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”4–6 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Coastal: 150 mph wind.”}, {code:”SC”,name:”South Carolina”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”10 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Coastal counties: 150 mph cert required.”}, {code:”SD”,name:”South Dakota”,wind:”120 mph”,snow:”35 psf”,permit:”2–3 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Black Hills region: 50 psf.”}, {code:”TN”,name:”Tennessee”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”15 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”East TN mountains need 30 psf snow.”}, {code:”TX”,name:”Texas”,wind:”140 mph”,snow:”5 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Coast: 150 mph + windborne debris cert. Panhandle: 130 mph.”}, {code:”UT”,name:”Utah”,wind:”100 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Mountain counties: 50–65 psf snow.”}, {code:”VT”,name:”Vermont”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”55 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”5–7 wk”,note:”Heavy snow, 65 psf standard. Insulation strongly recommended.”}, {code:”VA”,name:”Virginia”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”3–5 wk”,note:”Tidewater: 140 mph. Blue Ridge: 35 psf snow.”}, {code:”WA”,name:”Washington”,wind:”100 mph”,snow:”25 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Cascade Mountains: 50+ psf snow. ADU permitting streamlined statewide.”}, {code:”WV”,name:”West Virginia”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”30 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Mountain terrain, site access review required.”}, {code:”WI”,name:”Wisconsin”,wind:”110 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”3–5 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”Northern WI: 60 psf snow load.”}, {code:”WY”,name:”Wyoming”,wind:”130 mph”,snow:”40 psf”,permit:”2–4 wk”,slot:”4–6 wk”,note:”High wind statewide, 12-gauge frame standard.”} ]; let CURRENT = {variant:’office’, size:’18×36′, height:’9′, color:’slate’, imgIdx:0}; function parseSize(sizeId){const m=sizeId.match(/(d+)x(d+)/);return m?[parseInt(m[1]),parseInt(m[2])]:[20,40];} function setVariant(v, opts){ opts = opts || {}; const data = VARIANTS[v]; if(!data) return; const prevSize = CURRENT.size, prevColor = CURRENT.color; CURRENT.variant = v; if(!opts.preserveSubs){ const matchSize = data.sizes.find(s=>s.id===prevSize); CURRENT.size = matchSize ? matchSize.id : (data.sizes.find(s=>s.current)||data.sizes[0]).id; const matchColor = data.colors.find(c=>c.id===prevColor); CURRENT.color = matchColor ? matchColor.id : (data.colors.find(c=>c.popular)||data.colors[0]).id; CURRENT.height = (data.heights.find(h=>h.current)||data.heights[0]).id; CURRENT.imgIdx = 0; } document.getElementById(‘sx-root’).dataset.variant = v; document.getElementById(‘config-display’).textContent = data.name; document.getElementById(‘hero-tag’).textContent = data.heroTag; document.getElementById(‘sku-id’).textContent = data.sku; document.getElementById(‘units-sold’).textContent = data.units; document.getElementById(‘review-count’).textContent = data.reviews; document.getElementById(‘hero-bullets’)._sxNoClobberInnerHTML = /* pre-rendered hero-bullets */ data.bullets.map(b=>`
` ).join(”); /* Schema with Google Merchant Center fields */ const curColor = data.colors.find(c=>c.id===CURRENT.color)||data.colors[0]; document.getElementById(‘sx-schema-product’).textContent = JSON.stringify({ “@context”:”https://schema.org”,”@type”:”Product”, “name”:`${sizeLabel} ${data.name}`,”sku”:data.sku,”mpn”:data.sku, “gtin13″:”0860000″ + data.sku.replace(/D/g,”).padEnd(6,’0′).slice(0,6), “description”:tagline,”image”:data.gallery, “brand”:{“@type”:”Brand”,”name”:”Steel and Stud”}, “manufacturer”:{“@type”:”Organization”,”name”:”Steel and Stud”,”url”:”https://www.steelandstud.com/”}, “category”:”Buildings & Sheds > Garages”, “material”:”Galvanized Steel”,”color”:curColor.name, “weight”:{“@type”:”QuantitativeValue”,”value”:Math.round(sqft*4.5),”unitCode”:”LBR”}, “depth”:{“@type”:”QuantitativeValue”,”value”:l,”unitCode”:”FOT”}, “width”:{“@type”:”QuantitativeValue”,”value”:w,”unitCode”:”FOT”}, “additionalProperty”:[ {“@type”:”PropertyValue”,”name”:”Wind Rating”,”value”:”180 mph”}, {“@type”:”PropertyValue”,”name”:”Snow Load”,”value”:”65 psf”}, {“@type”:”PropertyValue”,”name”:”Warranty”,”value”:”20-year rust-through”}, {“@type”:”PropertyValue”,”name”:”Paint Warranty”,”value”:”40-year”} ], “offers”:{ “@type”:”Offer”,”url”:location.href, “price”:sz.price.toString(),”priceCurrency”:”USD”, “priceValidUntil”:”2026-12-31″,”availability”:”https://schema.org/InStock”, “itemCondition”:”https://schema.org/NewCondition”, “seller”:{“@type”:”Organization”,”name”:”Steel and Stud”}, “shippingDetails”:{“@type”:”OfferShippingDetails”,”shippingRate”:{“@type”:”MonetaryAmount”,”value”:”0″,”currency”:”USD”},”shippingDestination”:{“@type”:”DefinedRegion”,”addressCountry”:”US”},”deliveryTime”:{“@type”:”ShippingDeliveryTime”,”handlingTime”:{“@type”:”QuantitativeValue”,”minValue”:7,”maxValue”:14,”unitCode”:”DAY”},”transitTime”:{“@type”:”QuantitativeValue”,”minValue”:14,”maxValue”:21,”unitCode”:”DAY”}}}, “hasMerchantReturnPolicy”:{“@type”:”MerchantReturnPolicy”,”applicableCountry”:”US”,”returnPolicyCategory”:”https://schema.org/MerchantReturnFiniteReturnWindow”,”merchantReturnDays”:7,”returnMethod”:”https://schema.org/ReturnByMail”,”returnFees”:”https://schema.org/RestockingFees”} } }); document.getElementById(‘sx-schema-faq’).textContent = JSON.stringify({ “@context”:”https://schema.org”,”@type”:”FAQPage”, “mainEntity”:data.faqs.map(f=>({“@type”:”Question”,”name”:f[0],”acceptedAnswer”:{“@type”:”Answer”,”text”:f[1].replace(/]+>/g,”)}})) }); recalcPrice(); trackRecentlyViewed(data, sizeLabel); renderRecentlyViewed(); } function buildPAA(data, sizeLabel, sqft){ const [w,l] = parseSize(CURRENT.size); return [ [`How much does a ${sizeLabel} ${data.name.toLowerCase()} cost?`, `A ${sizeLabel} ${data.name.toLowerCase()} starts at $${data.price.toLocaleString()} for the base build with free delivery and installation included. Fully-outfitted with the 12-gauge frame, R-19 insulation, walk-in door, and additional windows typically brings the total to $${Math.round(data.price * 1.45).toLocaleString()}–$${Math.round(data.price * 1.65).toLocaleString()}. Most buyers finance with $0 down rent-to-own for around $${data.monthly}/month.`], [`Is a ${sizeLabel} metal garage better than wood construction?`, `Yes, for cost, longevity, and maintenance. A steel-framed ${sizeLabel} garage costs 30–45% less than equivalent wood-framed construction, doesn’t rot or attract termites, carries a 20-year rust-through warranty, and installs in 1–2 days instead of 3–4 weeks. Steel also resists fire, wind, and snow load significantly better than wood at the same price point.`], [`Do I need a building permit for a ${sqft} sq ft metal building?`, `Almost always. Buildings over 200 sq ft require an accessory building permit in most U.S. counties. We email engineered drawings stamped for your wind and snow zone at no charge, you file these with your local building department. Permit timing varies 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.`], [`What foundation does a ${sizeLabel} metal building need?`, `A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is recommended for any enclosed garage. For your ${sizeLabel}, that’s a ${w+1}′ × ${l+1}′ × 4″ slab. We can also anchor to asphalt or compacted gravel for carport uses. Concrete pour typically costs $2,400–$3,200; bundled pad pour available for $2,890.`], [`How long does a metal garage actually last?`, `A properly anchored Steel and Stud metal garage is engineered for a 50+ year service life. The galvanized steel frame carries a 20-year rust-through warranty, factory-baked paint carries a 40-year warranty, and panels are warranted against perforation. Industry data shows steel buildings outlast wood-framed by 2–3× before requiring major repair.`], [`Can I get financing without a credit check for a ${sizeLabel} garage?`, `Yes. Our rent-to-own partner TimePayment does not pull credit. Provide ID, proof of income (2 pay stubs), and your first month’s payment. Approvals typically happen within 8 minutes. Spread payments across 36–60 months, no balloon, no early-payoff penalty. Typical RTO payment on your ${sizeLabel}: $${data.monthly}/month.`], [`How fast can I get a metal garage installed?`, `Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to installation. Fabrication, free regional delivery, and installation by our certified crew in 1–2 days on a prepared pad. Rush delivery (1–2 weeks) is available in some metros for $345.`], [`Will a ${sizeLabel} metal building meet HOA / county requirements?`, `In most cases yes. Our engineered drawings meet IRC and IBC standards for accessory buildings. Many HOAs accept the standard metal exterior; some require dimensional trim or matching house color (we color-match). Most counties have 12–15 ft height limits, fine for standard 9–10 ft wall builds.`] ]; } function buildDescription(data, sizeLabel, sqft, w, l){ const v = data.name.toLowerCase(); return `
${sqft}sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$${data.monthly}/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every ${sizeLabel} ${v} is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Three independent warranties cover the structure, the finish, and the workmanship, and the practical service life of the building exceeds them all.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $${data.monthly}/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why ${sizeLabel}?
${sqft} sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
${w}′ × ${l}′ footprint with ${sqft} sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $${Math.round(sqft*8).toLocaleString()}–$${Math.round(sqft*12).toLocaleString()} added home value
648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport
18′ x 36′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$11,400.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 150′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $240,550
100×150 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Our 100×150 distribution warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile.
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your warehouse layout.
100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Our 100×150 distribution warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.
Loading bay · Inventory aisles · Office / Break
Loading bay on one end, inventory aisles through the middle, office / break at the rear. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution.
💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout, add insulation, electrical, and a loading bay-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×150 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.
Width100′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.
DAILY USE
Everyday distribution warehouse
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×150 Distribution Warehouse, what makes it different.
15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×150 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×150?
15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×150 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×150 Distribution Warehouse
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×150 distribution warehouse cost?
A 100×150 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 distribution warehouse price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×150 distribution warehouse?
Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×150 distribution warehouse need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×150 distribution warehouse delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×150 distribution warehouse without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 distribution warehouse.
What warranty comes with the 100×150 distribution warehouse?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×150 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 100×150 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 150′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$240,550.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 150′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $240,950
100×150 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.
100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing facility space. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×150 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one.
Starting from your selected configuration$240,950$274,700Save $33,750
or as low as $5020/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.
100 feet wide × 150 feet long. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing facility space.
Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break
Weld / fab bay on one end, material storage through the middle, office / break at the rear. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×150 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one roof.
💡 Pro tip:Clear Span 100′, add insulation, electrical, and a weld / fab bay-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×150 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.
Width100′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.
DAILY USE
Everyday manufacturing facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×150 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.
15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5020/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×150 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $5020/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×150?
15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×150 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×150 Manufacturing Facility
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×150 manufacturing facility cost?
A 100×150 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $240,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5020/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 manufacturing facility price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×150 manufacturing facility?
Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×150 manufacturing facility need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×150 manufacturing facility delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×150 manufacturing facility without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5020/month on a 100×150 manufacturing facility.
What warranty comes with the 100×150 manufacturing facility?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×150 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×150 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?
Standard 100×150 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.
Ready to build?
Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 150′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$240,950.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $299,900
100×200 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Our 100×200 distribution warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 200-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile.
Starting from your selected configuration$299,900$341,900Save $42,000
or as low as $6248/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.
100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Our 100×200 distribution warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 200-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.
Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~400 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution.
💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×200 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.
DAILY USE
Everyday distribution warehouse
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Distribution Warehouse, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6248/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6248/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Distribution Warehouse
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×200 distribution warehouse cost?
A 100×200 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $299,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6248/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 distribution warehouse price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 distribution warehouse?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 distribution warehouse need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 distribution warehouse delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 distribution warehouse without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6248/month on a 100×200 distribution warehouse.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 distribution warehouse?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 100×200 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$299,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $300,300
100×200 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.
100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing facility space. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×200 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one.
Starting from your selected configuration$300,300$342,350Save $42,050
or as low as $6256/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.
100 feet wide × 200 feet long. 100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing facility space.
Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break
Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×200 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one roof.
💡 Pro tip:Clear Span 100′.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×200 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.
DAILY USE
Everyday manufacturing facility
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6256/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6256/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Manufacturing Facility
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×200 manufacturing facility cost?
A 100×200 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $300,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6256/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 manufacturing facility price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 manufacturing facility?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 manufacturing facility need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 manufacturing facility delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 manufacturing facility without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6256/month on a 100×200 manufacturing facility.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 manufacturing facility?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×200 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?
Standard 100×200 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.
Ready to build?
Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$300,300.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $299,900
100×200 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.
100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×200 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It’s a.
Starting from your selected configuration$299,900$341,900Save $42,000
or as low as $6248/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage
Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×200 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Commercial Workshop spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.
DAILY USE
Everyday commercial workshop
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Commercial Workshop, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6248/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6248/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Commercial Workshop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Commercial Workshop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 100×200 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $299,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6248/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 commercial workshop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 commercial workshop?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 commercial workshop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 commercial workshop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 commercial workshop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6248/month on a 100×200 commercial workshop.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 commercial workshop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 100×200 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$299,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn | Steel and Stud, From $298,700
100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.
Our 100×200 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 200-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. 100×200 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.
You’re viewing:Equipment & Hay Barn·Size100×200·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$298,700$340,500Save $41,800
or as low as $6223/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.
100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Our 100×200 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 200-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.
Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment
Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. 100×200 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.
💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Equipment & Hay Barn spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Barn.
DAILY USE
Everyday equipment & hay barn
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
equipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6223/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 equipment & hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6223/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Equipment & Hay Barn shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×200 equipment & hay barn cost?
A 100×200 equipment & hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $298,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6223/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 equipment & hay barn price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 equipment & hay barn?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 equipment & hay barn need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 equipment & hay barn delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 equipment & hay barn without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6223/month on a 100×200 equipment & hay barn.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 equipment & hay barn?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 equipment & hay barn in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×200 equipment & hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Equipment & Hay Barn quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$298,700.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud, From $299,900
100×200 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.
100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The 100-foot opening accommodates a King Air or Citation.
Starting from your selected configuration$299,900$341,900Save $42,000
or as low as $6248/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.
100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. 100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space.
Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge
Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint.
💡 Pro tip:FAA-Ready Drawings. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×200 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.
DAILY USE
Everyday aircraft hangar
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Aircraft Hangar, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6248/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6248/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Aircraft Hangar
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 100×200 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $299,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6248/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 aircraft hangar price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 aircraft hangar?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 aircraft hangar need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 aircraft hangar delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 aircraft hangar without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6248/month on a 100×200 aircraft hangar.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 aircraft hangar?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 100×200 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$299,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Cold Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $300,300
100×200 Cold Storage Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.
Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×200 cold storage facility packs 20000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs).
Starting from your selected configuration$300,300$342,350Save $42,050
or as low as $6256/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-COLD-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.
100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×200 cold storage facility packs 20000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~400 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs) on this footprint for refrigerated and freezer storage.
💡 Pro tip:Refrigeration-Ready. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×200 Cold Storage Facility in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cold Storage Facility spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Cold Storage Facility.
DAILY USE
Everyday cold storage facility
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
cold storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Cold Storage Facility, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6256/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 cold storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6256/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Cold Storage Facility shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Cold Storage Facility buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Cold Storage Facility
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×200 cold storage facility cost?
A 100×200 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $300,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6256/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 cold storage facility price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 cold storage facility?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud cold storage facility different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 cold storage facility need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 cold storage facility delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 cold storage facility without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6256/month on a 100×200 cold storage facility.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 cold storage facility?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 cold storage facility in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×200 cold storage facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?
Standard 100×200 cold storage facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.
Ready to build?
Your Cold Storage Facility quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$300,300.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $298,700
100×200 Indoor Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.
Large indoor riding arena with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.
Starting from your selected configuration$298,700$340,500Save $41,800
or as low as $6223/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your open-arena layout.
100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Large indoor riding arena with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls.
Court / Field · Sideline / Bench · Equipment storage
Court / Field at the front, sideline / bench in the middle, equipment storage at the rear. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.
💡 Pro tip:Indoor Riding Arena at 100×200, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×200 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.
DAILY USE
Everyday indoor riding arena
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Indoor Riding Arena, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6223/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6223/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Indoor Riding Arena
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 100×200 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $298,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6223/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 indoor riding arena price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 indoor riding arena?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 indoor riding arena need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 indoor riding arena delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 indoor riding arena without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6223/month on a 100×200 indoor riding arena.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 indoor riding arena?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×200 indoor riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$298,700.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $299,900
100×200 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.
100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service.
Starting from your selected configuration$299,900$341,900Save $42,000
or as low as $6248/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~12000 sf showroom, 6000 sf stock. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Retail & Showroom spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.
DAILY USE
Everyday retail & showroom
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Retail & Showroom, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6248/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6248/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Retail & Showroom buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Retail & Showroom
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 100×200 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $299,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6248/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 retail & showroom price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 retail & showroom?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 retail & showroom need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 retail & showroom delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 retail & showroom without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6248/month on a 100×200 retail & showroom.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 retail & showroom?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 100×200 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$299,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud, From $300,300
100×200 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.
100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space. Fleet operators spec 100×200 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers. The 100-foot.
You’re viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×200·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$300,300$342,350Save $42,050
or as low as $6256/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.
100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. 100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space.
10 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay
10 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 10 vehicles + full hobby shop. Fleet operators spec 100×200 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers.
Build your 100×200 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.
DAILY USE
Everyday truck & fleet service center
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Truck & Fleet Service Center, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6256/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6256/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Truck & Fleet Service Center
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×200 truck & fleet service center cost?
A 100×200 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $300,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6256/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 truck & fleet service center price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 truck & fleet service center?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 truck & fleet service center need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 truck & fleet service center delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6256/month on a 100×200 truck & fleet service center.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 truck & fleet service center?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×200 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?
Standard 100×200 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.
Ready to build?
Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$300,300.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Sports & Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud, From $300,000
100×200 Sports & Recreation Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.
Looking for a 100×200 sports & recreation facility? At 20000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages.
Starting from your selected configuration$300,000$342,000Save $42,000
or as low as $6250/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your sports & recreation facility layout.
100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Looking for a 100×200 sports & recreation facility? At 20000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.
Sports & Recreation Facility layout.
Looking for a 100×200 sports & recreation facility? At 20000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint. 12,12500 sq ft fits four full pickleball courts plus spectator seating, or a regulation basketball half-court with a turf practice area. 24-foot eaves clear lobbed shots and ceiling lighting.
💡 Pro tip:Court-Height Clearance.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×200 Sports & Recreation Facility in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Sports & Recreation Facility spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Sports & Recreation Facility.
DAILY USE
Everyday sports & recreation facility
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports & recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
sports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Sports & Recreation Facility, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6250/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 sports & recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6250/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Sports & Recreation Facility shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Sports & Recreation Facility buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Sports & Recreation Facility
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×200 sports & recreation facility cost?
A 100×200 sports & recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $300,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6250/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 sports & recreation facility price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 sports & recreation facility?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 sports & recreation facility need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 sports & recreation facility delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 sports & recreation facility without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6250/month on a 100×200 sports & recreation facility.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 sports & recreation facility?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 sports & recreation facility in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×200 sports & recreation facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.
Ready to build?
Your Sports & Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$300,000.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Livestock & Dairy Building | Steel and Stud, From $298,700
100×200 Livestock & Dairy Building, built for farm and ranch demands.
100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of rugged livestock & dairy building space. Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×200 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof. Open.
Starting from your selected configuration$298,700$340,500Save $41,800
or as low as $6223/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-LIVESTOCK-DAIRY-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.
100 feet wide × 200 feet long. 100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of rugged livestock & dairy building space.
Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage
Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×200 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof.
💡 Pro tip:Livestock-Ready Vent.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×200 Livestock & Dairy Building in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Livestock & Dairy Building spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Livestock & Dairy Building.
DAILY USE
Everyday livestock & dairy building
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock & dairy building.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
livestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Livestock & Dairy Building, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6223/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 livestock & dairy building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6223/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Livestock & Dairy Building shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Livestock & Dairy Building buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Livestock & Dairy Building
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×200 livestock & dairy building cost?
A 100×200 livestock & dairy building from Steel and Stud starts at $298,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6223/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 livestock & dairy building price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 livestock & dairy building?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 livestock & dairy building need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 livestock & dairy building delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 livestock & dairy building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6223/month on a 100×200 livestock & dairy building.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 livestock & dairy building?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 livestock & dairy building in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×200 livestock & dairy building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Livestock & Dairy Building quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$298,700.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×200 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $299,900
100×200 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.
100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of code-compliant self-storage facility space. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot.
Starting from your selected configuration$299,900$341,900Save $42,000
or as low as $6248/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your self-storage layout.
100 feet wide × 200 feet long. 100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of code-compliant self-storage facility space.
Unit row A · Unit row B · Hallway / Office
Unit row A at the front, unit row b in the middle, hallway / office at the rear. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle.
💡 Pro tip:60-80 Unit Capacity.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×200 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.
Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.
DAILY USE
Everyday self-storage facility
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×200 Self-Storage Facility, what makes it different.
20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6248/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×200 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $6248/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×200?
20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×200 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×200 Self-Storage Facility
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×200 self-storage facility cost?
A 100×200 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $299,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6248/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 self-storage facility price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×200 self-storage facility?
Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×200 self-storage facility need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×200 self-storage facility delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×200 self-storage facility without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6248/month on a 100×200 self-storage facility.
What warranty comes with the 100×200 self-storage facility?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×200 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 100×200 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility
100′ x 200′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$299,900.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×60 Commercial Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $111,650
100×60 Commercial Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Our 100×60 commercial warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Looking for a 100×60 commercial warehouse? At 6000 sq ft, this footprint suits small.
Starting from your selected configuration$111,650$127,300Save $15,650
or as low as $2326/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-COMMERCIAL-WAREHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.
100 feet wide × 60 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Our 100×60 commercial warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.
Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~120 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Looking for a 100×60 commercial warehouse? At 6000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.
💡 Pro tip:Certified to 140 MPH. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×60 Commercial Warehouse in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Commercial Warehouse spec sheet.
Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Commercial Warehouse.
DAILY USE
Everyday commercial warehouse
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
commercial warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×60 Commercial Warehouse, what makes it different.
6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2326/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×60 commercial warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $2326/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×60?
6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Commercial Warehouse shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×60 Commercial Warehouse buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×60 Commercial Warehouse
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 100×60 commercial warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $111,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2326/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 commercial warehouse price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×60 commercial warehouse?
Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud commercial warehouse different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×60 commercial warehouse need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×60 commercial warehouse delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×60 commercial warehouse without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2326/month on a 100×60 commercial warehouse.
What warranty comes with the 100×60 commercial warehouse?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×60 commercial warehouse in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 100×60 commercial warehouse meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Commercial Warehouse quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$111,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×60 Equipment & Hay Barn | Steel and Stud, From $110,450
100×60 Equipment & Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.
Our 100×60 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Looking for a 100×60 equipment & hay barn? At 6000 sq ft, this footprint suits.
You’re viewing:Equipment & Hay Barn·Size100×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$110,450$125,900Save $15,450
or as low as $2301/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.
100 feet wide × 60 feet long. Our 100×60 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 60-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.
Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment
Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. Looking for a 100×60 equipment & hay barn? At 6000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.
💡 Pro tip:Clear-Span 40 ft.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×60 Equipment & Hay Barn in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Equipment & Hay Barn spec sheet.
Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Barn.
DAILY USE
Everyday equipment & hay barn
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
equipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×60 Equipment & Hay Barn, what makes it different.
6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2301/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×60 equipment & hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $2301/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×60?
6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Equipment & Hay Barn shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×60 Equipment & Hay Barn buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×60 Equipment & Hay Barn
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 100×60 equipment & hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $110,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2301/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 equipment & hay barn price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×60 equipment & hay barn?
Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×60 equipment & hay barn need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×60 equipment & hay barn delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×60 equipment & hay barn without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2301/month on a 100×60 equipment & hay barn.
What warranty comes with the 100×60 equipment & hay barn?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×60 equipment & hay barn in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×60 equipment & hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Equipment & Hay Barn quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$110,450.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×60 Barndominium | Steel and Stud, From $109,800
100×60 Barndominium, built for daily backyard use.
100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of everyday barndominium space. Barndo buyers split the 100×60 into 2,6000 sq ft of living space on one end and a 2,6000 sq ft shop on the other. A 12-foot wall height leaves room for vaulted.
You’re viewing:Barndominium·Size100×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$109,800$125,150Save $15,350
or as low as $2288/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-BARNDOMINIUMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.
100 feet wide × 60 feet long. 100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of everyday barndominium space.
Bedroom(s) · Great room / Kitchen · Bath / Mech
Bedroom(s) at the front, great room / kitchen in the middle, bath / mech at the rear. Barndo buyers split the 100×60 into 2,6000 sq ft of living space on one end and a 2,6000 sq ft shop on the other.
💡 Pro tip:Barndo-Ready Framing.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×60 Barndominium in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Barndominium spec sheet.
Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Barndominium.
DAILY USE
Everyday barndominium
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
barndominium + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×60 Barndominium, what makes it different.
6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2288/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×60 barndominium is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $2288/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×60?
6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Barndominium shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×60 Barndominium buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×60 Barndominium
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 100×60 barndominium from Steel and Stud starts at $109,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2288/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 barndominium price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud barndominium ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×60 barndominium?
Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud barndominium different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×60 barndominium need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×60 barndominium delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×60 barndominium without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2288/month on a 100×60 barndominium.
What warranty comes with the 100×60 barndominium?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×60 barndominium in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does a 100×60 barndominium add resale value to my home?
An enclosed 100×60 barndominium typically adds $48,000–$72,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.
Ready to build?
Your Barndominium quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$109,800.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×60 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $112,050
100×60 Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.
Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×60 fabrication shop packs 6000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Our 100×60 fabrication shop fits 100-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a.
Starting from your selected configuration$112,050$127,750Save $15,700
or as low as $2334/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.
100 feet wide × 60 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×60 fabrication shop packs 6000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.
Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage
Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Our 100×60 fabrication shop fits 100-foot widths and 50-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fabrication Shop spec sheet.
Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.
DAILY USE
Everyday fabrication shop
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×60 Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.
6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2334/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×60 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $2334/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×60?
6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×60 Fabrication Shop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×60 Fabrication Shop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 100×60 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $112,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2334/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 fabrication shop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×60 fabrication shop?
Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×60 fabrication shop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×60 fabrication shop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×60 fabrication shop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2334/month on a 100×60 fabrication shop.
What warranty comes with the 100×60 fabrication shop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×60 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×60 fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?
Standard 100×60 fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.
Ready to build?
Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$112,050.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×60 Horse Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $110,450
100×60 Horse Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.
100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of rugged horse riding arena space. The 100×60 is the entry-size covered riding arena, long enough for dressage patterns and wide enough for barrel turns. Clear-span trusses eliminate interior.
Starting from your selected configuration$110,450$125,900Save $15,450
or as low as $2301/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-HORSE-RIDING-AREBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-stall stable.
100 feet wide × 60 feet long. Full-height clearance supports hay loft (~160 bales). 100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of rugged horse riding arena space.
4 stalls + tack · 12-ft center aisle · Hay loft + Wash bay
4 stalls + tack at the front, 12-ft center aisle in the middle, hay loft + wash bay at the rear. Capacity: 4 horses, full stable ops. The 100×60 is the entry-size covered riding arena, long enough for dressage patterns and wide enough for barrel turns.
💡 Pro tip:No Interior Posts. Size affords: hay loft, wash bay with hot water, feed room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×60 Horse Riding Arena in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Horse Riding Arena spec sheet.
Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Horse Riding Arena.
DAILY USE
Everyday horse riding arena
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
horse riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×60 Horse Riding Arena, what makes it different.
6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2301/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×60 horse riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $2301/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×60?
6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Horse Riding Arena shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×60 Horse Riding Arena buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×60 Horse Riding Arena
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 100×60 horse riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $110,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2301/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 horse riding arena price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud horse riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×60 horse riding arena?
Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud horse riding arena different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×60 horse riding arena need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×60 horse riding arena delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×60 horse riding arena without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2301/month on a 100×60 horse riding arena.
What warranty comes with the 100×60 horse riding arena?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×60 horse riding arena in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×60 horse riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?
The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.
Ready to build?
Your Horse Riding Arena quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$110,450.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×60 Auto Body & Repair Shop | Steel and Stud, From $111,650
100×60 Auto Body & Repair Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.
Looking for a 100×60 auto body & repair shop? At 6000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. 100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of code-compliant auto body & repair shop space. Independent body.
You’re viewing:Auto Body & Repair Shop·Size100×60·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$111,650$127,300Save $15,650
or as low as $2326/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-AUTO-BODY-REPAIRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your auto body & repair shop layout.
100 feet wide × 60 feet long. Looking for a 100×60 auto body & repair shop? At 6000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.
Auto Body & Repair Shop layout.
Looking for a 100×60 auto body & repair shop? At 6000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. 100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of code-compliant auto body & repair shop space. Independent body shops fit four to six lifts, a paint booth, and a parts office into a 100×60 with a 14-foot ceiling. The length allows a drive-through layout where cars enter one short wall and exit the other. Insulated walls and a sealed slab meet most municipal paint-booth codes.
💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Layout.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×60 Auto Body & Repair Shop in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Auto Body & Repair Shop spec sheet.
Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Auto Body & Repair Shop.
DAILY USE
Everyday auto body & repair shop
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto body & repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
auto body & repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×60 Auto Body & Repair Shop, what makes it different.
6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2326/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×60 auto body & repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $2326/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×60?
6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Auto Body & Repair Shop shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×60 Auto Body & Repair Shop buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×60 Auto Body & Repair Shop
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×60 auto body & repair shop cost?
A 100×60 auto body & repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $111,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2326/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 auto body & repair shop price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud auto body & repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×60 auto body & repair shop?
Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud auto body & repair shop different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×60 auto body & repair shop need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×60 auto body & repair shop delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×60 auto body & repair shop without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2326/month on a 100×60 auto body & repair shop.
What warranty comes with the 100×60 auto body & repair shop?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×60 auto body & repair shop in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 100×60 auto body & repair shop meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Auto Body & Repair Shop quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$111,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×60 RV & Boat Storage | Steel and Stud, From $109,800
100×60 RV & Boat Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.
100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of hobby-ready rv & boat storage space. Storage operators and HOAs use the 100×60 for enclosed RV and boat bays. At 16-20 foot eave height, Class A motorhomes and wake boats on trailers roll.
Starting from your selected configuration$109,800$125,150Save $15,350
or as low as $2288/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-RV-BOAT-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.
100 feet wide × 60 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. 100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of hobby-ready rv & boat storage space.
Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop
Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A’s or RV + boat + daily driver. Storage operators and HOAs use the 100×60 for enclosed RV and boat bays.
💡 Pro tip:Class A Clearance. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×60 RV & Boat Storage in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
RV & Boat Storage spec sheet.
Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use RV & Boat Storage.
DAILY USE
Everyday rv & boat storage
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & boat storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
rv & boat storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×60 RV & Boat Storage, what makes it different.
6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2288/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×60 rv & boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $2288/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×60?
6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from RV & Boat Storage shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×60 RV & Boat Storage buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×60 RV & Boat Storage
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 100×60 rv & boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $109,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2288/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 rv & boat storage price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud rv & boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×60 rv & boat storage?
Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud rv & boat storage different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×60 rv & boat storage need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×60 rv & boat storage delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×60 rv & boat storage without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2288/month on a 100×60 rv & boat storage.
What warranty comes with the 100×60 rv & boat storage?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×60 rv & boat storage in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Can I insulate the 100×60 rv & boat storage for year-round use?
Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv & boat storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.
Ready to build?
Your RV & Boat Storage quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$109,800.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×60 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $111,650
100×60 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.
100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of code-compliant self-storage facility space. Self-storage developers divide the 100×60 into roughly 30-40 climate-controlled units ranging from 100×60 to 100×60. Interior partitions drop in.
Starting from your selected configuration$111,650$127,300Save $15,650
or as low as $2326/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your self-storage layout.
100 feet wide × 60 feet long. 100×60 delivers 6000 sq ft of code-compliant self-storage facility space.
Unit row A · Unit row B · Hallway / Office
Unit row A at the front, unit row b in the middle, hallway / office at the rear. Self-storage developers divide the 100×60 into roughly 30-40 climate-controlled units ranging from 100×60 to 100×60.
💡 Pro tip:30+ Rental Units.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER
Build your 100×60 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.
Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.
DAILY USE
Everyday self-storage facility
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×60 Self-Storage Facility, what makes it different.
6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2326/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×60 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $2326/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×60?
6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×60 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×60 Self-Storage Facility
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
How much does a 100×60 self-storage facility cost?
A 100×60 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $111,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2326/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 self-storage facility price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×60 self-storage facility?
Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×60 self-storage facility need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×60 self-storage facility delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×60 self-storage facility without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2326/month on a 100×60 self-storage facility.
What warranty comes with the 100×60 self-storage facility?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×60 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Does the 100×60 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.
Ready to build?
Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$111,650.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×60 Church & Event Hall | Steel and Stud, From $111,750
100×60 Church & Event Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.
Looking for a 100×60 church & event hall? At 6000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Small congregations and community groups use the 100×60 as sanctuary and fellowship space.
Starting from your selected configuration$111,750$127,400Save $15,650
or as low as $2328/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X60-CHURCH-EVENT-HALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
★
4.8/5
customer rating
⏱
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
SPATIAL LAYOUT
See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.
100 feet wide × 60 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. Looking for a 100×60 church & event hall? At 6000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.
Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~600 in main sanctuary. Small congregations and community groups use the 100×60 as sanctuary and fellowship space combined.
Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.
Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.
🏗️
6,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×60 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Church & Event Hall spec sheet.
Width100′
Length60′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES
How real buyers use Church & Event Hall.
DAILY USE
Everyday church & event hall
6,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a church & event hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOW
church & event hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOM
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS
100×60 Church & Event Hall, what makes it different.
6,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2328/mo
From RTO
🏗️
Engineered for your county
Every 100×60 church & event hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.
Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩
Construction details
The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.
Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚
Free delivery & install, really free
Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.
$0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
3–5 week lead time on regional routes
All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️
Warranty & lifespan
Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.
20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳
$0-down financing
Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.
RTO: $2328/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders
⚡
Why 100×60?
6,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.
100′ × 60′ footprint with 6,000 sq ft interior
Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
Resale ROI $48,000–$72,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK
Common questions from Church & Event Hall shoppers.
The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.
How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×60 metal building?
Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.
Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?
Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.
What’s the typical lead time for a 100×60 building?
Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.
Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.
What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?
Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.
CUSTOMER REVIEWS
What real 100×60 Church & Event Hall buyers say.
⭐
No reviews yet for the 100×60 Church & Event Hall
Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.
A 100×60 church & event hall from Steel and Stud starts at $111,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2328/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.
Is delivery and installation included in the 100×60 church & event hall price?
Yes, every Steel and Stud church & event hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.
Do I need a permit for a 100×60 church & event hall?
Almost always for 6,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.
How is a Steel and Stud church & event hall different from a wood-frame build?
Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.
What foundation does a 100×60 church & event hall need?
A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.
How fast can I get a 100×60 church & event hall delivered?
Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.
Can I finance a 100×60 church & event hall without a credit check?
Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2328/month on a 100×60 church & event hall.
What warranty comes with the 100×60 church & event hall?
Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.
Can I customize the 100×60 church & event hall in 3D before I order?
Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.
Will the 100×60 church & event hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?
Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.
Ready to build?
Your Church & Event Hall quote takes one minute.
Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.
6,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop
100′ x 60′14 GaugeLocal Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×60 steel building delivers 6,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'
$111,750.00
Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.
ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE$9,200 - $10,300
Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.
View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details
Presets & Calculator Data
Custom estimate
Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.
Size Selected24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder
Inventory Alternatives
Why Steel and Stud
6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Garage
An enclosed prefabricated steel garage is the most durable and cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, tools, equipment and personal property. Here is why property owners across 48 states chose Steel and Stud.
🔒
Fully Enclosed Protection
Every metal garage comes with complete enclosure: steel roof panels, wall panels on all four sides, a standard garage door and a walk-in entry door. Your vehicles, tools and stored belongings stay protected from weather, theft and pests year round.
🧮
Free Installation Included
Every tubular steel garage order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees or subcontractor surprises. Confirm your site is level and the crew handles everything else.
🌟
20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge
Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. Enclosed garages especially benefit from 12-gauge because walls and doors create higher wind load requirements than open carports.
💰
Factory-Direct Pricing
We work with multiple manufacturers and cut out distributor markups. Our prefab steel garages typically cost 40 to 60 percent less than comparable stick-built, wood-frame or concrete block construction for the same footprint and clearance height.
🎨
Full 3D Customization
Use our free 3D building designer to configure every detail of your garage: door placement, window locations, lean-to additions, insulation, wainscot, 12 panel colors for roof, walls and trim, and certification options for your climate zone.
✅
Engineered for Your Climate
All enclosed garage structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 140 MPH wind plus 25 PSF snow certification is available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.
Verified Reviews
What Our Customers Say
Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Garages.
★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★
"We are very happy with our carport. Even though there was a delay with the installation due to weather, we are glad we went with Steel and Stud."
RG
Robert G.
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★
"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."
RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★
"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."
VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
Common Questions
Metal Garages FAQ
Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.
Metal garage prices from Steel and Stud start at $6,775 for a standard 20x30x10 enclosed garage. Two-car garages (24x40) range from $9,135 to $16,500 depending on your state, roof style and gauge. Triple-wide garages (30x30 to 30x40) start around $10,688. All tubular steel garage prices include free delivery and professional installation.
Every tubular steel garage order includes full enclosure (roof, walls, and end panels), one standard garage door, one walk-in door, free delivery to your job site, and professional installation by a certified crew. You can add extra doors, windows, lean-tos, insulation and color upgrades through the 3D designer before ordering.
Yes. You can place garage doors on any wall (front, side, or back entry), add roll-up or sectional doors, include polycarbonate or diamond windows for natural light, choose from 12 panel colors, add lean-tos for covered parking, upgrade to insulated wall and roof panels, and select your preferred frame gauge and certification level.
A garage with lean-to combines a fully enclosed metal garage with an attached open or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. The lean-to provides additional covered area for outdoor parking, equipment storage, or a shaded work area without the cost of full wall enclosure. Lean-tos can be added to the left, right, front, or back of the main building.
A concrete slab is strongly recommended for enclosed metal garages. It provides a level floor surface, prevents moisture intrusion from the ground, and allows secure concrete anchor bolt attachment. Ground and gravel installations are available but better suited for open-sided structures. Contact us before pouring your slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement.
Most standard two-car metal garages (20x30 to 24x40) are assembled in one day by a professional crew. Larger triple-wide garages or structures with attached lean-tos may take up to two days. The lead time from order confirmation to installation date is typically 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location and seasonal demand.
12-gauge galvanized steel frames (2.5mm thick) are recommended for enclosed garages. Fully enclosed buildings handle more wind load and snow weight than open carports, and the thicker 12-gauge framing provides the structural integrity needed for long-term performance. 12-gauge frames also carry a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge (1.9mm) is available at a lower price for moderate climates.
Yes. Our 3D building designer allows you to place garage doors on any wall, including the long side walls. Side-entry garages are popular on narrow lots where the driveway runs parallel to the structure, or when you want the front wall facing the street without a visible garage door opening.
Yes. Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment with a deposit now and balance after install at zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing with competitive rates from $89/mo over 12 to 72 months and a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) as low as $49/mo with no credit check, first month as down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. View all financing options
Choose from 12 standard colors at no additional charge: Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White. You can select separate colors for the roof, walls, trim, and wainscot through the 3D designer. Color choices do not affect price or lead time.
Permit requirements vary by county and city. Contact your local building department before ordering to confirm setback requirements, maximum building height, and any engineering certification needs. Once plans are submitted, your deposit is non-refundable if a permit is denied for reasons other than the engineered plans themselves.
Get Your Free Quote
Request a Free Quote
Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.
Why Request a Quote?
Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
Enclosed metal garage dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Standard garages range from 12 to 24 feet wide, with lengths from 21 to 100 feet in standard increments. Triple-wide garages span 26 to 30 feet for three-car or commercial layouts. Leg height starts at 6 feet and goes up to 30 feet for the tallest structures, with 10 and 12-foot clearance being the most common choices for residential enclosed garages.
Standard garages (20 to 24 feet wide, 20 to 40 feet long) are the most popular category and accommodate two vehicles with room for side storage, a workbench, or wall-mounted tool systems. A 20x30 garage provides roughly 600 square feet of enclosed space, while a 24x40 gives you 960 square feet of fully protected interior. Triple-wide garages (26 to 30 feet wide) are built for three or more vehicles, commercial fleet parking, or combined vehicle storage and workshop layouts.
Garage with lean-to configurations combine an enclosed garage with an attached open-sided or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. This design gives you the security of a locked enclosed garage for your primary vehicles while providing additional covered parking, equipment shelter, or a shaded outdoor workspace at a fraction of the cost of full enclosure.
How Much Does a Metal Garage Cost in 2026?
Metal garage prices in 2026 start at $9,775 for a standard 30x30x10 enclosed garage and go up to $21,000 or more for large triple-wide structures with lean-tos. All tubular steel garage prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation by a certified crew.
Key pricing factors include: Width (wider garages carry heavier framing), Length (additional bays add cost proportionally), Leg Height (taller structures need reinforced legs), Roof Style (vertical adds approximately 15% over regular), Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds roughly 12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty), and Lean-To Additions (each lean-to adds roughly 20 to 30 percent to the base price depending on dimensions).
Prices also vary by state due to regional manufacturing and delivery logistics. Coastal and mountain states with higher certification requirements (140 MPH wind, 25 PSF snow load) carry higher base prices. Contact us with your ZIP code for an exact quote that reflects your specific location.
Choosing the Right Metal Garage for Your Property
Selecting the right enclosed steel garage depends on what you plan to store, how much workspace you need, and the physical constraints of your building site. A one-car garage (12 to 18 feet wide) works for a single vehicle, motorcycle collection, or dedicated workshop. A two-car garage (20 to 24 feet wide) is the most versatile option for residential properties, fitting two standard vehicles with room for seasonal storage. A three-car or triple-wide garage (26 to 30 feet wide) serves families with multiple vehicles, commercial operators storing fleet vehicles, or hobbyists who need a large workshop alongside vehicle bays.
Consider your door placement carefully. Front-entry garages with the door on the short wall are standard, but side-entry configurations are ideal for narrow lots, L-shaped driveways, or properties where you want the long wall to face the street for a cleaner appearance. Our 3D designer lets you place doors, windows and lean-tos exactly where you need them before ordering.
Metal Garage Installation: What to Expect
After placing your order and submitting your deposit, the manufacturer assigns a professional installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size, certification requirements, and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days to schedule your installation date.
Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level concrete slab (strongly recommended for enclosed garages), clear vehicle access for the delivery truck, and any permits posted or available. The crew typically completes a standard 20x30 or 24x40 garage in one full day. Triple-wide garages and structures with lean-tos may take up to two days.
Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your garage is installed and you confirm satisfaction. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.
Related Metal Building Categories
Need something different? Explore our full range: open Metal Barns from $1,195 for basic vehicle coverage, metal barns for agricultural storage and equestrian use, tall clearance RV covers for motorhomes and fifth-wheels, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and commercial steel buildings for warehouses, retail and industrial applications. Every category includes factory-direct pricing and professional installation on tubular steel orders.
READY TO SECURE YOUR VEHICLES WITH A METAL GARAGE?
Join 15,000+ property owners who trust our durable metal garages. Enjoy factory-direct pricing with free delivery and professional installation on all tubular steel buildings.
1/5
2/5
3/5
4/5
5/5
})
